2008 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let
this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull up and hold the bar
located under the front of
the seat to unlock it.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.
Then try to move the seat with your body, to make
sure the seat is locked into place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Lumbar (Sedan)
To adjust the height of
Your vehicle may
the driver’s seat cushion,
turn the knob located
on the outboard side of
the seat cushion.
have manually operated
lumbar support for
the driver’s seat.
Turn the knob forward to raise the height of the seat
cushion and rearward to lower it.
To adjust the front seat lumbar support, use the lever
located on the outboard side of the seatback.
Push the lever down to adjust the support for the lower
part of the seatback. Pull the lever up to return the
support to its original position.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seats.
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
{CAUTION:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower it, press
the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push
the head restraint down.
The front seat head restraints also tilt forward. To tilt the
head restraint, first put it in the upright position by tilting it
forward fully and releasing it. Then slowly move the head
restraint forward until it is in the desired position.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
This position reduces the chances of a neck injury in
a crash.
The front head restraints can also be removed.
To remove the restraint, press the button located on the
top of the seatback, and lift the head restraint from the
guide sleeve. Replace the head restraint before driving.
The rear seats have head restraints that are adjustable
up and down, but they do not tilt.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation (Sedan)
Folding the Seatback
The rear seatbacks can be folded down to increase
cargo space.
To fold down the seatback:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1. Remove the safety belt strap from the safety belt
guide by pulling it through the slot.
2. Push the head restraints all the way down.
3. Unlatch the center safety belt by pressing the
red button on the buckle.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Detach the center safety belt from the mini buckle
by inserting the key into the slot in the mini buckle,
pressing the release button, and allowing it to
retract.
5. Pull up the release knob located on top of the
rear seatback.
6. Fold the rear seatback forward and down.
To return the seatback to the upright position:
1. Hook the safety belts into the safety belt guide.
2. Lift the seatback up and push it to its original
position.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
3. Push down and rearward firmly on the top of the
seatback until it latches securely in the fully
upright position.
6. Insert the safety belt strap back into the safety
belt guide.
4. To reattach the center seat safety belt to the mini
buckle, pull it from the retractor.
7. Reattach the center safety belt by pushing the
latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Push the latch plate at the end of the safety belt
strap into the buckle until the mechanism clicks.
Make sure the strap is not twisted. The sliding
latch plate will face the front of the vehicle.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback)
Folding the Rear Seats
The rear seats can be folded to increase cargo space.
To fold the rear seats:
1. Lower the head restraints completely.
2. Unlatch the center safety belt by pressing the
red button on the buckle.
4. Pull up the release knob, located on the top of the
seatback, and fold the seatback forward and down.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding
a rear seat.
5. Move the safety belt buckles and safety belt in the
center seating position out of the space between
the seatback and the seat cushion so they are not
in the way as the seat is being folded.
3. Detach the center safety belt from the mini buckle
by inserting the key into the slot in the mini buckle,
pressing the release button, and allowing it to retract.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Pull the release handles on the rear side of the seat
cushion to unlock the seat cushion.
8. Clip the hook to the front seat head restraint to
keep the rear seat secure.
7. Lift the seat cushion up and flip it forward.
9. When the rear seat is folded, store the safety belt
buckles and center safety belt in the storage area
under the floor mat.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unfolding the Seats
To return the rear seats to the normal seating position:
1. Unclip the hook from the front seat head restraint.
2. Remove the safety belt buckles and center
seat safety belt from the storage area.
Notice: Damage to the safety belt buckle or rear
seat locking mechanism can occur if the safety belt
and buckles are pinched under the rear seat
cushion. Do not place the safety belt and buckles
on the floor under the rear seat cushion when
the rear seat is put back to the sitting position.
3. Push the seat cushion down to its original position
until it latches securely. Try to pull up on the seat
to make sure it is locked in place.
4. Hook the safety belts in the outboard seating
positions into the retaining clips.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. To reattach the center seat safety belt to the mini
buckle, pull it from the retractor.
{CAUTION:
9. Reattach the center safety belt by pushing the latch
plate into the buckle until it clicks.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
5. Lift the seatback up and push it back to its original
latched position.
6. Unhook the safety belts in the outboard seating
positions from the retaining clips.
10. Push down and rearward firmly on the top of
the seatback until it latches securely in the fully
upright position.
7. Return the safety belt buckles and the center seat
safety belt to their original position between the
rear seatback and the seat cushion. Make sure
the straps of the safety belt and buckles are
not twisted.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, you might not be, if you
are buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones take the forces.
That is why safety belts make such good sense.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in
a crash — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a
good driver does not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under
the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as much
protection this way.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones,
and that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash,
you would not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable
safety belt and the safety belt is not attached, see
on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
3. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the
belt across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough, see
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for
the driver and right front passenger.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release button
to make sure it has locked into position.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When
you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will
wear, so the extender will be long enough for you.
To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to
making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, then
return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some
age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle
and never allow children to play with the
safety belts.
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not weigh
much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
For example, in a crash at only 25mph(40km/h),
a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a
240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate restraint.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to
use a child restraint.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant
in a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across
the strongest part of an infant’s body, the
back and shoulders. Infants should always be
secured in appropriate infant restraints.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that
is unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides
restraint with the
seating surface
against the back
of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides
restraint for the child’s
body with the harness.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{CAUTION:
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint. Because there are
different systems, it is important to refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint.
Make sure the child is properly secured,
following the instructions that came with
that restraint.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If you use two child
restraints (A) in the
rear outside seating
positions, the safety belt
for the center rear
seat position (B) will
not be accessible.
There are a couple of things you need to know
about using child restraints in your rear seat:
If you use a child restraint
in the center rear seating
position (A), the safety
belts and the child
restraint LATCH anchors
for the rear outside
Therefore, you will not be able to secure a child
restraint or have a passenger ride in the center rear
seating position.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
seating positions (B)
will not be accessible.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Therefore, you will not be able to secure child restraints
or have passengers ride in the rear outside seating
positions.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Top Tether Anchor
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a
kit is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hatchback models may have zippers over the lower
anchor areas. If so, unzip the seat cover below
the labels to access each lower anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on
the cover.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sedan
Hatchback
For sedan models, the top tether anchors are located
under the covers behind the rear seat on the filler panel.
Pull open the cover to access the top tether anchors.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side
of the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
For hatchback models, the top tether anchors (B) are
located in the rear cargo area, attached to the back
wall (A) of the vehicle. Squeeze and pull the front part
of the plastic cover to access the top tether anchors.
Remove the cargo shade before installing the top tether.
The cargo shade should remain off while the top
tether is in use. Be sure to use an anchor located on
the same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could
be seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a
LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has one,
after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.5. Route and tighten the top tether according
to your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Flip the cover to access the top tether
anchors.
2.3. For hatchback models, remove the cargo
shade before installing the top tether.
The cargo shade should remain off while
the top tether is in use.
2.4. Raise the headrest or head restraint if the
desired seating position has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint. See Head
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has a headrest or
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether under
the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you
secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a
top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in
the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
in between the headrest
or head restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
page 1-40.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around
the restraint. The child restraint instructions will
show you how.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator (Sedan) on page 3-31
for more information on this, including important
safety information.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you
secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a
top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), the
off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
on page 3-31.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator in the
passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay
on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the off symbol is
not lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
Your vehicle may have the following airbags:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right
{CAUTION:
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints”
to the safety belts. All airbags are designed to
work with safety belts, but do not replace them.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate
in rollover, rear crashes, or in many side
crashes.
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against,
or very close to, any airbag when it inflates
can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts
help keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle. They are not designed to inflate
in frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted airbags.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
{CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the
best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags
for the driver and right front passenger, they are in
the side of the seatbacks closest to the door.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce
the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s
or right front passenger’s head and chest. However,
they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds
a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that
is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted
side impact airbags, deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side impact.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during
vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have seat-mounted
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are intended
to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags will inflate if the
crash severity is above the system’s designed
threshold level. The threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag
causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are
airbag modules in the side of the front seatbacks
closest to the door.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some
people may not even realize the airbags inflated.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot
for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn on
the hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible when you start your vehicle.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States – Sedan
Canada – Sedan
If you have a sedan, the airbag off symbol will be visible
near the clock, located in the center of the instrument
panel, during the system check. See Passenger
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
system. Improper service can mean that the
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with a sensor that
is part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensor
is designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
United States –
Hatchback
Canada – Hatchback
We recommend that children be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
If you have a hatchback, the airbag off symbol will be
visible in the Secondary Information Center (SIC) during
the system check. See Secondary Information Center
check is complete, the airbag off symbol will be visible
under certain conditions.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped), the off symbol will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags
are off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the off
symbol is not lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the
child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) anytime
the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When the
passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag or
airbags to be enabled, the off symbol will not light.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off symbol is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional
material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions,
seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask
the person to place the seatback in the fully upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this
position for two to three minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
page 1-71 for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
page 7-17.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This could either prevent proper deployment of
the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, front sensors, or airbag wiring can affect
the operation of the airbag system.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery
or trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such
as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort
enhancing pad or device, installed under or on
top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with
the operation of the passenger sensing system.
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
for service.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
One key is used for the ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer/retailer
removes the key tag and gives it to the first owner.
The tag has a code on it that tells your dealer/retailer
how to make extra keys. For vehicle security, keep
the key tag in a safe place and also record the
key number somewhere other than inside of the
vehicle. If you lose your key, you will be able to
have a new one made easily using the tag.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have an electronic immobilizer
designed to protect your car against theft. If so, only
keys with the correct electronic code can be used
page 2-16 for additional information. Even if a key
has the same profile, it will not start the engine if the
electronic code is incorrect. If you need a new key,
contact your dealer/retailer who can obtain the correct
key code. Also see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-8.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter does not
work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle
for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section.
1. This device may not cause interference.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
K (Unlock): Press this button to unlock all of the
doors. The hazard lamps will flash twice to indicate
that unlocking has occurred and that the theft-deterrent
system is deactivated.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
You can lock and unlock your vehicle’s doors from
about 20 ft (6 m) away using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Sedan
n (Lock/Unlock): Press this button to lock all of the
doors. The hazard lamps will flash once and the horn
will sound to indicate that locking has occurred and that
the theft-deterrent system is active. Press this button
again to unlock all of the doors. The hazard lamps will
flash twice to indicate that unlocking has occurred
and that the theft-deterrent system is deactivated.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold this
button for approximately one second to open the trunk.
The LED light, on the transmitter, will flash when the
buttons on the transmitter are pressed.
Hatchback
Sedan
The lock and unlock buttons will not operate and the
theft-deterrent system will not activate while the key is
in the ignition.
The following functions may be available if your vehicle
has the RKE system:
Hatchback
Q(Lock): Press this button to lock all of the doors.
If all of the doors and the trunk or liftgate are closed,
the hazard lamps will flash once to indicate that locking
has occurred and that the theft-deterrent system is
active.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is
lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through
your dealer/retailer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your dealer/retailer.
When the dealer/retailer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer/retailer has
coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not
unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum
of five transmitters matched to it.
Hatchback
Sedan
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter, do the
following:
Under normal use, the battery in your RKE transmitter
should last about two years.
1. Remove the screw from the back of the cover and
open the cover of the transmitter.
The battery is weak if the LED fails to illuminate or if
the transmitter will not work at the normal range in
any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle
before the transmitter works, it is probably time to
change the battery.
2. Pull the transmitter out of the cover and carefully
detach the sticker from the unit. Keep the sticker
clean.
3. Remove the battery and replace it with the new
one. Make sure the positive side of the battery
faces up. Use one three-volt, CR1620, or
equivalent, type battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
4. Attach the sticker and put the transmitter unit in
the cover.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Put the two halves back together and replace the
screw. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water
will not get in.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6. Test the transmitter operation.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
From the outside, use your key or the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry
To manually unlock the front doors from the outside,
insert the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle.
To manually lock the doors from the outside, insert
the key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All doors, except for the driver’s door, can be locked by
pushing down the manual door lock and then closing
the door. The driver’s door can only by locked from
the outside by using the key or the optional remote
keyless entry transmitter.
Door Ajar Reminder
If one of the doors on
the sedan is not closed
properly while the ignition
is on, the door ajar light on
the instrument panel comes
on and stays on until the
doors are closed.
From the inside, you can lock and unlock all of the
doors by pushing or pulling the manual door lock
located on each door.
Central Door Unlocking System
Your vehicle may be equipped with the central door
unlocking system. This system is activated from
the driver’s door.
If one of the doors on the hatchback is not closed
properly while the ignition is on, the door ajar light
on the secondary information center comes on and
stays on until the doors are closed.
From the outside, you can lock or unlock all the doors
by using either the key or the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped. From the inside, you can lock
or unlock all the doors by using the driver’s door
lock switch while the driver’s door is closed.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Opening a Rear Door When the
Security Lock is On
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
door security locks on
each rear door that prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors from
the inside.
2. Open the door from the outside.
If you do not cancel the security lock, adults or older
children who ride in the rear will not be able to open
the rear door from the inside. You should let adults
and older children know how to cancel the locks.
Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the
door from the outside.
2. Move the lever down to unlock.
Using the Rear Door Security Lock
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks can now be locked and unlocked
normally.
1. Move the lever up to lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
Lockout Protection
Notice: Pulling the inside door handle while the
rear door security locks are engaged could damage
your vehicle. Do not pull the inside door handle
while the rear door security locks are engaged.
This feature helps prevent locking the key in the car.
The driver’s door can only be locked with the door
closed. From the outside of the vehicle, close the
driver’s door and lock it using the key or the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitter.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of your vehicle. Always remember to
take your key with you.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the trunk on your sedan from outside of your
vehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinder and turn
the key clockwise or use the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped.
Trunk
{CAUTION:
Remote Trunk Release
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk
lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
If your vehicle has a trunk
release button located on
the driver’s door, you
can open the trunk from
inside your vehicle by
pressing the release
button.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Trunk Release Button
When closing the trunk, close from the center to ensure
it fully latches.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a trunk
release lever located on the
outboard side of the driver’s
seat, you can open the
trunk from inside your
vehicle by pulling the
release lever.
Trunk Release Lever
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the underside of the trunk lid.
This handle will glow following exposure to light.
Pull the release handle down to open the trunk
from the inside.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the liftgate on your hatchback from outside of
the vehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinder and
turn it counterclockwise or use the remote keyless
entry transmitter, if equipped. Then pull up the handle
above the license plate to open the liftgate.
Liftgate (Hatchback)
{CAUTION:
When closing the liftgate, close from the center to
ensure it fully latches.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
To lock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock cylinder
and turn it clockwise or use the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped.
The liftgate can also be locked or unlocked by the
central door unlocking system or remote keyless entry,
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
Manual Windows
Use the window crank to open and close each window.
The rear windows do not open fully.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with
children.
If your vehicle has power windows, the switches are
located on the driver’s door. In addition, each passenger
door has a switch for its own window.
The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to use the
power windows. To lower the window, press and hold
the switch. To raise the window, lift up on the switch.
Release the switch when the window reaches the
desired level.
When there are children in the rear seat
use the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Window Lockout
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal.
The window lockout is
located with the driver’s
power window switches.
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent system.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm when you lock
the doors using the key or the manual door lock. It arms
only when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Press the lockout button to stop the front and rear
passengers from using their window switches. The driver
can still operate all the windows with the lockout on.
Press the lockout button again to return to normal
window operation.
Arming the System
To arm the system, do the following:
Sun Visors
1. Close the doors, the windows, the hood, and the
trunk or liftgate.
To block out glare you can swing down the visors.
You can also remove them from the center mount
and swing them to the side.
Ensure that the windows are closed, as the system
can be armed even if the windows are open.
2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF and remove the key
from the ignition.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has vanity mirrors located on the back of
the sun visors. Swing down the sun visor to expose the
vanity mirror.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, the transmitter
will not arm the theft-deterrent system.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lock the doors by pressing the lock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
• The LED light on the transmitter will flash once.
• All of the doors will lock.
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
• The hazard warning lamps will flash once and
the horn will sound.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
• The security light will flash to indicate that the
theft-deterrent system is armed. For hatchback
models, the security light is located on the
secondary information center (SIC) on the
center of the instrument panel. See Secondary
page 3-43. For sedan models, the security light is
located on the center of the instrument panel near
page 3-4.
− The LED light on the transmitter will
flash once.
− All of the doors will unlock.
− The hazard warning lamps will flash twice.
If the door is not opened or if the engine is not started
within 30 seconds after disarming the system using
the transmitter, all of the doors will automatically lock
and the theft-deterrent mode will rearm.
How the System Alarm is Activated
To avoid activating the alarm by accident, do one of the
following:
If a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened without using
the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, the
horn will sound and the lamps will flash for up to
30 seconds.
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate the alarm
when a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened.
If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent system,
lock the vehicle using the key or the manual door locks.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
If the system alarm is active, it can be deactivated using
one of the following methods:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Press the lock or unlock buttons on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Otherwise, the alarm will automatically stop after
30 seconds. The system will then lock the doors
and rearm the theft-deterrent system.
Immobilizer Operation
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
Your vehicle may have a passive theft-deterrent system.
The immobilizer system prevents your vehicle from
being started by unauthorized persons.
If the hazard warning lamps flash once when you
press the lock or unlock buttons on the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the theft-deterrent system alarm
was activated while you were away.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
Immobilizer
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
If your vehicle has an immobilizer system, your vehicle
has a special key that works with the theft-deterrent
system. There is a transponder in the key head that is
electronically coded. The correct key will start the vehicle.
An invalid key immobilizes the engine. The immobilizer
system isolates the power supply to the ignition system,
the fuel pump and the fuel injectors.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the immobilizer system does not recognize the
electronic code when the key is turned to START,
the engine will not start and the security indicator will
continue blinking. If your key is ever damaged, you may
not be able to start your vehicle.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light continues flashing, there
may be a problem with the theft-deterrent system.
Turn the ignition off and try again.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another key. At this time, you may
also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer who can have a new key made.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
the new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
Up to five keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
If you lose or damage your keys, only a dealer/retailer
can have new keys made.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch can be
turned to four different
positions with the key.
LOCK/OFF: This position locks the steering wheel,
ignition, shift lever and transmission. This is the
only position in which you can insert or remove the
key. If the steering wheel is locked, move it form right
to left and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
ACC/ACCESSORY: This position operates some of the
electrical accessories, such as the radio, but not the
climate control system.
ON/RUN: This is the position the switch returns after
you start the engine and release the key. The switch
stays in ON/RUN when the engine is running. But even
when the engine is not running, you can use ON/RUN
to operate the electrical accessories, and to display
some instrument panel warning lights.
{CAUTION:
On manual transmission vehicles, turning the
key to LOCK/OFF will lock the steering column
and result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle.
This could cause a collision. If you need to turn
the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn
the key only to ACC/ACCESSORY. Do not push
the key in while the vehicle is moving.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The switch returns to
ON/RUN for normal driving. Do not turn the key to
START if the engine is running.
Even if the engine is not running, ACC/ACCESSORY
and ON/RUN allow you to operate electrical accessories,
such as the radio.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Procedure
Starting the Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The engine will not start in any other position — that
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try to help avoid draining your battery
or damaging your starter.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition to
START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and
start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down — that is a safety feature.
When the engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven.
Do not run your engine at high speed when
it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C),
let the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, near the battery.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If electrical parts or
accessories are added, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer/retailer. If you
do not, the engine might not perform properly.
Any resulting damage would not be covered by
your vehicle’s warranty.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured.
Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in?
The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer/retailer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
Automatic Transmission Operation
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)
Ensure that the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of PARK (P) while holding the brake pedal down,
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift
lever is located on the console between the seats.
Movement between certain positions requires pushing
the release button on the front of the shifter.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
{CAUTION:
When shifting from NEUTRAL (N) to REVERSE (R), you
need to apply the regular brake and push the release
button on the front of the shifter and then forward.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart while you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D4): This position is for
normal driving.
When operating your vehicle in severe cold conditions,
the transmission may be prevented from shifting into
D4 gear until the transmission fluid has warmed up to
it’s operational temperature.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you
could damage the transmission. Have your vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h)
and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds
until then.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power but
lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use it on
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever
is put in FIRST (1), the transmission will not shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want
to use your brakes off and on.
If there is a malfunction with the automatic transmission,
the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or the HOLD
indicator light will turn on or flash. See Malfunction
on page 3-48.
Notice: Do not drive in SECOND (2) at speeds
over 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage
the transmission. Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D4)
as much as possible. Do not shift into SECOND (2)
unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h)
or you can damage your engine.
Have your vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the Hatchback, the HOLD light will light up on the
secondary information center. For the Sedan, the HOLD
light will light up on the instrument panel cluster.
Hold Mode
If your vehicle’s transmission has hold mode, you can
select this mode to drive with some characteristics
of a manual transmission. With hold mode turned on,
the automatic transmission will stay in a specific
gear range.
When hold mode is activated, the transmission runs as
follows:
Selector Lever Position
Gear Range
Third Gear
Second Gear
First Gear
D4
2
1
Hold Mode Features
Winter Function
Select hold mode while in AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D4) or SECOND (2) gear to help the
vehicle maintain traction on slippery road surfaces,
such as snow, mud, or ice.
Manually Controlling Shift
Select hold mode to use your automatic transmission
like a three-speed manual transmission.
Press the HOLD button on the shift lever console to turn
on hold mode. Press the button again to turn off hold
mode, and return to normal automatic transmission
operation.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press
the accelerator pedal.
Manual Transmission Operation
Five-Speed
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal, lift up the ring on the shift lever and shift
into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal
slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
This is your shift pattern.
Here is how to operate your manual transmission:
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition
is on, the brake system warning light will come on.
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of your vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Parking Brake
The parking brake lever is located between the
bucket seats.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. If the vehicle has
an automatic transmission, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the shift lock release button. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
information.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat.
To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Your automatic transmission vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift-lock control system. You have to
fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holding
the brake pedal down, try this:
1. Set the parking brake.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
3. Remove the cover over the shift-lock release slot by
prying it off using a small, flat object. The shift-lock
release slot is located at the top of the shift lever.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Before leaving your vehicle, do the following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly apply the
parking brake.
2. Fully press in the clutch pedal and place the shift
lever into the gear position as stated below:
• When parking on level ground, place the shift
lever into NEUTRAL.
• When parking downhill, place the shift lever in
REVERSE (R).
• When parking uphill, place the shift lever in
FIRST (1).
4. Insert the key into the shift-lock release slot and
press and hold the key.
3. After shifting, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF,
remove the key and release the clutch.
5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
6. Remove the key from the shift-lock release slot,
insert the key into the ignition and start the
engine.
7. Replace the shift-lock release slot cover.
8. Apply and hold the regular brake fully and release
the parking brake.
9. Shift to the gear you want.
10. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
Engine Exhaust
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
{CAUTION:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your
vehicle when the engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when it is on fairly level
ground, always set the parking brake and
move the automatic transmission shift lever
to PARK (P), or the manual transmission shift
lever to NEUTRAL.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
not move. If you have an automatic transmission,
on page 2-27.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or
down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows
you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps
behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use
and pull it for nighttime use.
Outside Manual Mirrors
The outside rearview mirrors should be adjusted so you
can see a little of the side of your vehicle when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Adjust the outside manual mirrors using the control
lever located next to the mirror.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flat against
the side of the vehicle by pushing them toward the
vehicle’s doors.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For hatchback models, the
control for the power mirror
is located on the driver’s
door panel, above the
Outside Power Mirror
For sedan models,
the control for the power
mirrors is located on
power window buttons.
the instrument panel, left
of the steering wheel.
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust by pressing the
left side of the selector switch for the driver’s side
mirror or the right side for the passenger’s side
mirror.
To adjust the mirrors, do the following:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust by moving the
selector switch to L for the driver’s side mirror or
R for the passenger’s side mirror.
2. To adjust each mirror, press the corresponding
edges located on the four-way control pad to
move the mirror in the direction that you want it to
go. The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to
adjust the mirrors.
2. To adjust the mirror, press the corresponding edges
located on the four-way control pad to move the
mirror in the direction that you want it to go - up,
down, left or right. The ignition must be turned to
ON/RUN to adjust the mirrors.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flat against
the side of the vehicle by pushing them toward the
vehicle’s doors.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Convex Mirror
Storage Areas
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,
look farther away than they really are.
Your vehicle has shopping hooks on each front seatback
for your convenience. Lift the headrest to access the
hooks.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If your vehicle has this feature, when you operate
the rear window defogger, the heated driver’s and
passenger’s outside power mirrors are warmed to
help clear them of ice, snow, and condensation.
See “Rear Window and Outside Mirror Defogger”
more information.
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cupholder(s)
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
There are two cupholders located in the center
instrument panel, below the climate control system.
To use the cupholder, push in on its outer edge. Then
pull out the cupholder. After use, push in the cupholder
until it latches.
If your vehicle has this feature, the sunglasses storage
compartment is located above the driver’s door.
To open, pull down and hold the upper part of the
cover. To close the compartment, let go of the cover
and the compartment will automatically close.
There is also a cupholder located in the rear of the
center console.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the sunroof to the vent position, open the
sunshade. Then press and hold the driver’s side of
the switch. To close the sunroof, press and hold
the passenger’s side of the switch until the sunroof
reaches the desired position.
Sunroof
If the vehicle has this
feature, the switch is
located on the headliner
between the sun visors.
To fully open the sunroof, open the sunshade. Then
press and hold the passenger’s side of the switch.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the driver’s side
of the switch. The sunroof will stop if the switch is
released during operation.
In both the vent and fully open positions, the air flow
can be adjusted by pushing and holding the switch until
the sunroof moves to the desired position.
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition is turned
to ON/RUN. The sunroof can be opened to a vent
position or it can be opened all of the way.
The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if the vehicle
has an electrical failure.
You must manually open and close the sunshade.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
C. Digital Clock and Secondary Information Center.
page 3-19.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sedan shown
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
page 3-19.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem. Your
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
The hazard warning flasher
button is located to the
right of the climate control
system on the sedan. It is
located in the center of the
instrument panel on the
hatchback.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in
the ignition switch.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise it
to the highest level to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The tilt wheel lever is
located underneath the
steering column slightly
to the left.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To tilt the steering wheel, hold the wheel and push the
lever down. Then, move the wheel to a comfortable
position and pull the lever up to lock the wheel in place.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
on page 3-15.
page 3-17.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on if the
ignition is turned to
ON/RUN.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash
in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and
other drivers will not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to this position to
choose a delayed wiping cycle.
Windshield Wipers
OFF: Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
Misting Function
Move the lever toward INT for a single wiping cycle.
Hold it there until the windshield wipers start; then let go.
The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe. If you
want more wipes, hold the band toward INT longer.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent
you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the
wiper blades before using them.
If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. If the blades do become damaged, get
new blades or blade inserts.
Sedan shown, Hatchback similar
Use this lever located on the right side of the steering
wheel to operate the windshield wipers. The ignition must
be turned to ON/RUN to operate the windshield wipers.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
HI (High Speed): Move the lever to this position for
wiping at high speed.
LO (Low Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at low speed.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
(Hatchback)
To wash the windshield, pull the windshield washer/wiper
lever toward you with the ignition turned to ON/RUN.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Your vehicle may have a rear window washer/wiper.
Operate the rear window washer/wiper system by
pushing the windshield washer/wiper lever away from
you. The wiper operates intermittently when the lever is
in the first position. Washer fluid sprays onto the rear
window and the wiper operates continuously when
the lever is pushed to the second position.
When the lever is released, the washers stop, but the
wipers will continue to wipe for several cycles and
will either stop or will resume at the speed being
used previously.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window washer
will run out of fluid before the windshield washer. If you
can wash your windshield but not your rear window,
check the fluid level.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise Control
If your vehicle has cruise control, a speed of about
24 mph (39 km/h) or more can be maintained without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help
on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below 24 mph (39 km/h).
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
When the brakes are applied, or the clutch pedal if you
have a manual transmission, the cruise control turns off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
The cruise control pad is
located on the inboard
side of the steering wheel.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
1. Press the ON-OFF button to turn cruise control on.
2. Accelerate to the speed desired.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the SET button and release it. The cruise
control light will come on in the instrument panel
cluster to show that the cruise control is on.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerate pedal.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed.
Press the SET button, then release the button and
the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now
cruise at the higher speed.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the cruise control is set to a desired speed
and then the brakes are applied, or the clutch pedal
if you have a manual transmission. This shuts off
the cruise control. But it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle is going about 24 mph (39 km/h)
or more, briefly press the RESUME button.
• Press the RESUME button. Hold it there until the
desired speed is reached, and then release the
button. To increase the vehicle’s speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the RESUME button and
then release it. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The vehicle returns to the chosen speed and
stays there.
The accelerate feature only works after the cruise
control is turned on by pressing the SET button.
If the RESUME button is held longer, the vehicle keeps
going faster until the button is released or the brake
pedal is applied. Do not hold in the RESUME button,
unless you want the vehicle to go faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speed while
using cruise control:
• Press the SET button until the lower speed desired
is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the SET button. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Exterior Lamps
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Applying the
brake pedal will turn off the cruise control. Many drivers
find this to be too much trouble and do not use cruise
control on steep hills.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp band has three positions:
Ending Cruise Control
3(Headlamps): Turn the band to this position to turn
on the headlamps, together with the following:
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamp
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Parking Lamps
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal, or press the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transmission.
• Press the ON OFF button on the cruise control pad.
Erasing Speed Memory
The headlamps automatically turn off when the ignition
key is turned to LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY.
The cruise control set speed memory is erased, when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the band to this position to
turn on the parking lamps, together with the taillamps,
license plate lamp, and instrument panel lights.
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp band is in OFF or in the parking
lamp position.
OFF: Turn the band to this position to turn all lamps off,
except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
• The parking brake is released.
Headlamps on Reminder
An indicator light on instrument panel cluster will come
on when the DRL system is on.
If the driver’s door is opened while the ignition is turned
to LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY with the lamps
left on, a warning chime will sound.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps and instrument panel lights will not
be illuminated unless you have turned the exterior lamps
control to the parking lamp or headlamp position.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
The DRL system will turn off when one of the following
conditions are met:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
• The ignition is off.
• The parking brake is on.
• The high-beam headlamps are on.
• The low-beam headlamps are on.
• The flash-to-pass feature is used.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
If your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for better
visibility in foggy or misty conditions. The band located
on the middle of the turn signal/multifunction lever
controls the fog lamps.
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
While using the fog lamps, the ignition must be turned
to ON/RUN and the low-beam headlamps or parking
lamps must be on.
Turn the band to ON to turn the fog lamps on. An
indicator light comes on in the secondary information
center on the hatchback or in the instrument panel
cluster on the sedan, when the fog lamps are on.
Turn the band to OFF to turn the fog lamps off. The fog
lamps will also turn off when the high-beam headlamps
are turned on. When the high-beam headlamps are
turned off, the fog lamps will turn on again.
Hatchback
Sedan
The thumbwheel for this feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column.
Turn the thumbwheel to brighten or dim the lights.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamp
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
Your vehicle will have one of the following dome lamp
switches.
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the taillamps, license plate lamps,
instrument panel lights, and parking lamps. When the
ignition is turned off, the power to these features will
automatically turn off after 5 seconds once the driver’s
door is closed.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
With the accessory power outlet, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
With Sunroof
The accessory power outlet is located next to the
parking brake on the center console.
To use the outlet, remove the protective cap. When
not in use, always cover the outlet with the protective
cap. The accessory power outlet is operational when the
ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
Without Sunroof
The switches have three positions.
ON: The light comes on and stays on.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
O(Door): The light comes on when a door is opened.
The light turns off when all the doors are closed.
OFF: The light remains off even when a door is opened.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience
a problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on accessory power outlets.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The ashtray is located at the lower part of the center
instrument panel. To remove the front ashtray for
cleaning, open the ashtray fully, press in the retaining
tab and pull the bin out.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
The cigarette lighter is located to the right of the front
ashtray. To use it, turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN, push the cigarette lighter in all the way
and let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while
it is heating.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clock
Climate Controls
If you have a sedan there is a digital clock located in
the center of the instrument panel, above the center air
outlets. When the ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN, the time is displayed in the digital clock.
There are three adjusting buttons for the digital clock:
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle
can be controlled with this system.
H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press the H button
once. To go forward more than one hour, press and hold
the button until the correct hour is reached.
M (Minute): To go forward one minute, press the
M button once. To go forward more than one minute,
press and hold the button until the correct minute
is reached.
S (Set): To reset the time to the nearest hour, press the
S button.
For example, if the set button is pressed while the time
is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to 8:00.
If this button is pressed while the time is between 8:30
and 8:59, the display is set to 9:00.
Uplevel shown, Base similar, Hatchback only
After disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse,
reset the clock.
If you have a hatchback there is a clock located in the
Secondary Information Center (SIC), see Secondary
page 3-43.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the current mode, select one of the following
from the right knob:
Y(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument panel
outlets.
\(Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets, and then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets.
[(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor
outlets. Some of the air will also be directed to the rear
outlets. Be sure to keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow the flow of air to the rear compartment.
Uplevel shown, Base similar, Sedan only
Temperature Control: Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to manually increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle. Turn the knob to the blue
area for cool air and to the red area for warm air.
The right knob can also be used to select the defog and
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
?(Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air
from coming into the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle or to
help heat or cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly.
9(Fan): Turn the middle knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. The fan must be on in order for
the air conditioning compressor to run.
If your vehicle has a recirculation button (uplevel
model), press the button to turn the recirculation mode
on. When the button is pressed, an indicator light in
the button comes on. Press the button again to return
to outside air mode.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a lever (base model), move the lever
to choose the recirculation mode.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
Using the recirculation mode for extended periods may
cause your windows to fog. If this happens, select
the defrost mode.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
:(Outside Air): This mode brings outside air into
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Press the A/C button.
the vehicle.
If your vehicle has a recirculation button (uplevel
model), press the button until the recirculation mode
is turned off. Your vehicle will then return to outside
air mode.
4. Select the recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle
has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
If your vehicle has a lever (base model), move the lever
to choose the outside air mode.
A/C (Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has air
conditioning, follow these steps to use the system.
Start the engine and set the fan control knob to
the desired speed. The air conditioning compressor
does not operate when the fan control knob is in the
off position. Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning compressor on and off. When the A/C
button is pressed, an indicator light in the button
comes on to show that air conditioning is activated.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip underneath
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger
Your vehicle may have a rear window and outside
mirror defogger. This feature only works when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
or moisture condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. Before
using this feature, clear as much snow from the
rear window as possible.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
Select one of these available modes from the right knob.
<(Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window and outside mirror defogger on
or off. An indicator light in the button comes to show
that the feature is activated.
É (Defog): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the floor outlets. A small amount of air is
also directed to the outboard outlets for the side windows
and to the instrument panel side outlets. When this
mode is selected, the system runs the air-conditioning
compressor. To defog the windows faster, turn the
temperature control knob clockwise to the warmest
setting.
If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, the rear
window defogger will remain on until the button is
pressed again or the engine is turned off.
If your vehicle has air conditioning, the rear window
defogger will turn off about 10 minutes after the button
is pressed. The defogger can also be turned off by
pressing the button again or by turning the engine off.
1(Defrost): This mode directs the air to the
windshield and the outboard outlets for the side windows.
A small amount of air is also directed to the instrument
panel side outlets. When this mode is selected, the
system runs the air-conditioning compressor. To defrost
the windows faster, turn the temperature control knob
clockwise to the warmest setting.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to
the defogger grid.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
Outlet Adjustment
To open an outlet, press on its cover. Turn the cover to
change the direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
1. Open the glove box halfway down.
Your vehicle may have a passenger compartment
air filter. It is located behind the glove box and can be
accessed after removing the glove box from its housing.
2. Grip the glove box by both the upper and lower
sides and pull it out of its housing.
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering
the module. The air cleaner/filter may need to be
changed periodically.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the four screws on the knee bolster.
4. Remove the knee bolster.
5. Remove the filter cover by pressing in on the
bottom retaining tab and pulling the cover down.
6. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
7. Then reverse the steps to install the new air
filter and replace the glove box.
View the air flow arrows on the filter before installing
to ensure the filter is installed correctly.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when there is
a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells
you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even
dangerous. So please get to know your vehicle’s
warning lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is
a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As the
details show on the next few pages, some warning lights
come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they are working. If you are familiar with
this section, you should not be alarmed when this
happens.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and
economically.
Your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the
following pages.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
United States Automatic Transmission Sedan shown, Canada Manual Transmission Sedan similar
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the number of miles, used
in the United States, or kilometers, used in Canada,
traveled for up to two trips.
Hatchback
Sedan
You can cycle between the odometer and trip
odometers A and B by pressing the reset button
located in the lower right area of the speedometer.
By pressing the reset button, you can tell how many miles
or kilometers have been recorded on either Trip A or
Trip B since you last set the trip odometer back to zero.
The tachometer displays your engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine above 6,500 rpm,
your vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the tachometer above
6,500 rpm.
To reset each trip odometer to zero, press and hold
the reset button. The reset button resets only the
trip odometer that is being displayed. Each trip
odometer must be reset individually.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Reminders
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel
cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the airbag sensor, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic
module. For more information on the airbag system,
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The safety belt light will
come on when the engine
is started and stay on
until the driver’s safety belt
is buckled.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. The light
should go out and the
system is ready.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light will not
come on.
Safety Belt Reminder Tone
If your vehicle has this feature, a tone will sound for
several seconds when the engine is started to remind
people to fasten their safety belts. The tone will not
sound if the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
(Sedan)
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
United States – Sedan
Canada – Sedan
If you have a sedan, the airbag off symbol will be visible
near the clock, located in the center of the instrument
panel, during the system check.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when the engine is started. If the light does not
come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light for several seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, if the off symbol is lit
on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped).
If the off symbol is not lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more on this, including
important safety information.
{CAUTION:
If the off symbol in the passenger airbag
status indicator does not come on when you
have a rear-facing child restraint installed in
the right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag and side
airbag (if equipped). A child in a rear-facing
child restraint can be seriously injured or killed
if the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags
inflate. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag or airbags. Do not use
a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat unless the airbag or airbags
have been turned off.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
This light will come on
briefly when the ignition
is turned on, and the
engine is not running,
as a check to show
you it is working.
It should go out when the engine is started. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have
a problem with the electrical charging system. Have
it checked by your dealer/retailer. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery. If you must drive
a short distance with the light on, be certain to turn
off all your accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner to help reduce the drain on the battery.
United States
Canada
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not fully
release. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Antilock Brake System Warning
Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light
will come on briefly
when the engine is started.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF or if
the light comes on, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while
you are driving, your vehicle needs service. See your
dealer/retailer. If the regular brake system warning light is
not on, you still have brakes, but you do not have antilock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also
on, you do not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with your regular brakes. See Brake System
The ABS warning light will come on briefly when you
turn the ignition to ON/RUN. This is normal. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hold Mode Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, this light comes
on when the hold mode
is active.
If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehicle
checked. See “Hold Mode” under Automatic
information.
United States Sedan
Canada Sedan
Your vehicle has an engine coolant temperature gage.
With the ignition turned to ON/RUN, this gage shows
the engine coolant temperature.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your
engine is too hot. It means that your engine coolant
has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
United States Hatchback
Canada Hatchback
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure Light
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a tire
pressure light.
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate
that there is an OBD II
problem and service
is required.
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started
and provides information about tire pressures and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is Solid
This indicates that one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so.
If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
Solid
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light will flash for about a
minute and then stay on solid for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with every
page 5-58 for more information.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by your warranty.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
If the Light Is Flashing
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or replacement tires that do not match your
vehicle’s original tires can affect your vehicle’s
emission controls and can cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
When the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, this light comes
on and should go out after a few seconds as a check
to show it is working. If the light does not come on, have
it repaired. This light also comes on during a malfunction
in one of two ways:
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is
On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer/retailer for service as
soon as possible.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your dealer/
retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic
tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that
might have developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system. The
vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This can happen if you have recently replaced the battery
or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not running,
the light will come on as a test to show you it is
working. The light will go out when you turn the
ignition on. If it does not come on with the ignition
on, you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb.
Have it fixed right away.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for a
moment. This is normal.
Oil Pressure Light
If your vehicle has low
engine oil pressure, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine,
or come on when you
are driving.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately
by your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, the fog lamps light
will come on when the
fog lamps are in use.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
If your vehicle has cruise
control, this light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
This light turns on
whenever the Daytime
Running Lamps are on.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
information.
more information.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Door Ajar Light
The door ajar light will
come on whenever a door
is opened, regardless
of the ignition position.
United States Sedan
Canada Sedan
If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s door is
open, you will also hear a warning chime.
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
When the tank nears empty, the low fuel warning light
will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
page 3-42 for more information.
Fuel Gage
United States Hatchback
Canada Hatchback
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
Low Fuel Warning Light
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
This light comes on when
the vehicle is low on fuel.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
The low fuel warning light comes on when there is
approximately 1.7 gallons (6.0 liters) of fuel remaining
in the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
To turn the light off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Filling
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secondary Information Center (SIC)
Secondary Information Center (SIC) (Hatchback Only)
The Secondary Information Center (SIC) displays some of the warning lights and indicators. The SIC is located in
the center of the instrument panel, above the center air outlets. The digital clock is also located in the center of the
SIC. See Clock (Hatchback Only) on page 3-44 and Instrument Panel Overview on page 3-4 for more information.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clock (Hatchback Only)
Safety Belt Reminders
Your vehicle has a digital clock. The clock is located
in the secondary instrument cluster on the center of the
instrument panel, above the center air outlets. When
the ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
the time is displayed in the digital clock. There are
two adjusting buttons for the digital clock:
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The safety belt light will
come on and stay on until
the driver’s safety belt
is buckled.
H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press the H button
once. To go forward more than one hour, press and
hold the button until the correct hour is reached.
M (Minute): To go forward one minute, press the
M button once. To go forward more than one minute,
press and hold the button until the correct minute
is reached.
This light will come on briefly when you turn on the
ignition as a check to show you it is working.
After disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse,
reset the clock.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the Secondary
Information Center (SIC), which shows the airbag
symbol. The system checks the airbag’s electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor,
the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on or flashes when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly. Have
your vehicle serviced right away by your dealer/retailer.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
(Hatchback)
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
If the off symbol in the passenger airbag
status indicator does not come on when you
have a rear-facing child restraint installed in
the right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag and side
airbag (if equipped). A child in a rear-facing
child restraint can be seriously injured or
killed if the right front passenger’s airbag or
airbags inflate. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag or airbags. Do not use
a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat unless the airbag or airbags
have been turned off.
United
Canada – Hatchback
States – Hatchback
If you have a hatchback, the airbag off symbol will be
visible in the Secondary Information Center (SIC) during
the system check.
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light for several seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, if the off symbol is lit
on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped).
If the off symbol is not lit on the passenger airbag
status indicator, it means that the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
{CAUTION:
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
and the engine is not
running, as a check
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more on this, including
important safety information.
to show you it is working.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked by your dealer/retailer. Driving while
this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
Hold Mode Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, this light comes
on when the hold mode is
active.
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this
light will come on briefly
when the engine is started.
If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehicle
checked. See “Hold Mode” under Automatic
information.
If it does not come on have your vehicle serviced.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
If the light comes on, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while
you are driving, your vehicle needs service. See your
dealer/retailer. If the regular brake system warning light is
not on, you still have brakes, but you do not have antilock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also
on, you do not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with your regular brakes. See Brake System
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or replacement tires that do not
match your vehicle’s original tires can affect your
vehicle’s emission controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to these systems could
lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate
that there is an OBD II
problem and service
is required.
When the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, this light comes
on and should go out after a few seconds as a check
to show it is working. If the light does not come on, have
it repaired. This light also comes on during a malfunction
in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the Light Is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is
On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer/retailer for service as
soon as possible.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This can take several days of routine driving. If
you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your dealer/
retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic
tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that
might have developed.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil Pressure Light
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has low
engine oil pressure, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine,
or come on when you
are driving.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately
by your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not running,
the light will come on as a test to show you it is
working. The light will go out when you turn the
ignition on. If it does not come on with the ignition
on, you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb.
Have it fixed right away.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for a
moment. This is normal.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamp Light
Door Ajar Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, the fog lamps light
will come on when the
fog lamps are in use.
The door ajar light will
come on whenever a door
is opened, regardless
of the ignition position.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
Cruise Control Light
If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s door is
open, you will also hear a warning chime.
If your vehicle has cruise
control, this light comes
on whenever you set
the cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
information.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While your vehicle is parked:
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment
can be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
t u (Scan): Press this knob until SCAN flashes on
the display, then press either the up or the down arrow
buttons to determine the direction for the radio to scan
the stations. The radio will go to a station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either arrow button again to stop scanning.
AM-FM Radio (Single Display,
Base Level)
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
Playing the Radio
1. Turn the radio on.
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on or off.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume. VOL will appear on the display.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
for longer than two seconds. Ch will appear on the
display when the station has been set. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
Finding a Station
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for each pushbutton.
p (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AM-FM Radio (Double Display,
Base Level)
f (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BAS appears
on the display. Then turn the volume knob to increase
or to decrease the bass. The display will show the bass
level.
Press this button until TRE appears on the display.
Then turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease
the treble. The display will show the treble level.
If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
f (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Then turn the volume
knob to increase or to decrease the balance between
the right and the left speakers. The display will show
the balance level.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press and release this knob
to turn the system on. Press and hold this knob for
more than two seconds to turn the system off.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Then turn the volume knob to increase or
to decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the volume.
When the system is on, press and release this knob to
mute the system. Press and release this knob again
to turn the sound back on.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The previous volume setting is maintained whenever
the radio is turned on. The volume can be adjusted by
using the volume knob.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 36 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six FM-A and
six AM1, six AM2, six AM-A), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
Finding a Station
AM/AUX: Press this button to play an AM station while
a portable audio device is playing. Press this button
again and the system will begin playing audio from the
connected portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “no input device found” will be
displayed.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/AUX to select AM1, AM2, or AM-A.
Press FM to select FM1, FM2 or FM-A.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for longer than two seconds.
The channel number (CH#1 through CH#6) will
flash on the display when the station has been set.
Whenever that numbered preset button is
pressed, the station that was set will return.
FM: Press this button to switch between FM1 or FM2.
The display will show the selection.
¦¥ SEEK: Press the up or down SEEK arrow to go
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
5. Repeat the first four steps for each preset button.
AST (Automatic Store): Six FM1 preset stations with
the strongest reception in the region can be automatically
stored. Press the AST button for longer than one second.
The display will show AUTO SCANNING and then
SCANNING will flash on display. Once the stations are
stored, the radio will switch to FM1 and the first preset
station will begin to play. FM-A will appear on the display
when listening to the automatic stored stations. Press the
AM or FM button to cancel automatic store.
¦¥ TUNE: Press the up or down TUNE arrow to go
to the next or to the previous radio station.
SCAN: Push and release this button to scan radio
stations. The radio will go to a station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Push this button again to stop scanning.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Sound Function
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
The order for displayed sound function is BASS, MID,
TRE, FAD, BAL, EQ OFF, and VOL.
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Turn the power/volume
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will show the
balance level. When finished making the selection, press
this button to select the balance level.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Midrange/Treble): Press this button
until BAS appears on the display. Turn the power/volume
knob to increase or to decrease the bass. The display will
show the bass level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to select the bass level.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Turn the power/volume knob to increase or
to decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level. When
finished making the selection, press this button to select
the fade level.
Press this button until MID appears on the display.
Turn the power/volume knob to increase or to decrease
the midrange. The display will show the midrange level.
When finished making the selection, press this button to
select the midrange level.
Setting the EQ (Equalization)
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
appears on the display to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop,
voice, and techno. Turn the power/volume knob until
the desired equalization setting appears on the display.
When finished making the selection, press the
Press this button until TRE appears on the display.
Turn the power/volume knob to increase or to decrease
the treble. The display will show the treble level. When
finished making the selection, press this button to select
the treble level. If a station is weak or there is static,
decrease the treble.
SOUND button to select the equalization setting.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF appears on the display, turn the
power/volume knob until OFF appears on the display,
then press the SOUND button again to select the
equalization setting.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
Order of Sound Function
The order for displayed sound function is EQ OFF,
CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE,
TECHNO, and EQ OFF.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, turn the portable audio
player on. Press and hold the radio AM/AUX button for
more than two seconds or until audio from the device
begins to play over the car speakers.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
AUX IN (Auxiliary Input): Your radio system has an
auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the
faceplate. This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. You can
however, connect an external audio device such as an
iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or XM™
receiver, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. You may need to do additional
volume adjustments from the portable device if the
volume is not loud or soft enough.
The auxiliary input jack will also accept cell phone
connectors. Plug the cell phone connector into the
auxiliary input jack to hear the other side of a cell phone’s
conversation through the vehicle sound system.
AM/AUX: Press this button to listen to the radio while
a portable audio device is playing. The portable audio
device will continue playing, so you may want to stop it
or turn it off.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The previous volume setting is maintained whenever
the radio is turned on. The volume can be adjusted by
using the volume knob.
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
Finding a Station
AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station.
The display shows the selection.
FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station.
The display shows the selection.
( ) TUNE: Press the TUNE arrows to select radio
stations.
Press the up TUNE arrow to increase or the down
TUNE arrow to decrease the radio frequencies.
¦ ¥ SEEK: Press the SEEK arrows to seek radio
stations.
Playing the Radio
Press the up SEEK arrow to seek the next radio station
or the down SEEK arrow to seek the previous radio
station.
O (Power/Volume): Press and release this knob to
turn the system on. Press and hold this knob for
more than two seconds to turn the system off.
SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radio stations.
The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press this button again
to stop scanning.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the volume.
When the system is on, press and release this knob to
mute the system. Press and release this knob again
to turn the sound back on.
The radio scans stations only with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AST (Automatic Store)
Order of Sound Function
Six FM1 preset stations with the strongest reception in
the region can be automatically stored. Press the AST
button for more than two seconds. The display shows
AUTO SCANNING and then SCANNING flashes on the
display. Once the stations are stored, the radio switches
to FM1 and the first preset station begins to play. FM-A
displays while listening to the automatic stored stations.
Press the AM or FM button to cancel automatic store.
The order for displayed sound function is BASS, TRE,
BAL, FADE, EQ OFF, and VOL (Bass, Treble, Fade,
Balance, Equalization Off, and Volume).
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button until
BAS (bass) displays. Turn the O knob to increase or
to decrease the bass. The display shows the bass level.
After making the selection, press this button to set the
bass level selection.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 24 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six AM1, and
six AM2), can be programmed on the six numbered
buttons, by performing the following steps:
Press this button until TRE (treble) displays.
Turn the O knob to increase or to decrease the treble.
The display shows the treble level. After making the
selection, press this button to set the treble level
selection. If a station is weak or has static, decrease
the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1, FM2,
AM1 or AM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
more than two seconds. The preset button number
one through six flashes on the display when the
station has been set. When that numbered preset
button is pressed, that preset station returns.
5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for each preset
button.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Playing a CD
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
button until BAL (balance) displays. Turn the O knob
to increase or to decrease. The display shows the
balance level. After making the selection, press
this button to set the balance level.
When a CD is inserted, CDP displays. As the CD is
loading, Filecheck displays. As each new track starts
to play, Track and the track number displays.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When a CD is in the player
and the ignition is turned on, the radio must be turned
on before the CD starts playback. When the ignition
and radio are turned on, the CD starts playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD (fade) displays.
Turn the O knob to increase or to decrease the
fade between the front and the rear speakers. The
display shows the fade level. After making the selection,
press this button to set the fade level.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Setting the Equalization
The order for displayed customized equalization settings
are EQ OFF, CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP,
VOICE, TECHNO, EQ OFF.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
(equalization) displays to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop,
voice and techno. Turn the O knob until the desired
equalization setting displays. After making the selection,
press the SOUND button to set the equalization setting.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF displays, turn the O knob until OFF
displays, then press the SOUND button again to set the
equalization setting.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
( ) TUNE (Previous/Next Track): Press the up
TUNE arrow to go to the next track. The track number
displays. Press the down TUNE arrow to go to the
start of the current track. The player continues moving
forward or backward through the CD with each press of
the up or down arrows.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
AM: Press this button to listen to the radio while a CD
is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
FM: Press this button to listen to the radio while a CD
is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
CD/AUX: Press this button to play a CD while listening
to the radio. CDP displays when the CD player has
been selected. The CD symbol displays when a CD is
loaded.
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeat the current
track. RPT displays. Press this button again to turn
off repeat play.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the
CD. PAUSE flashes on the display. Press this button
again to start playing the CD.
3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks
in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM displays.
Press this button again to turn off random play.
EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. This is the
only way a CD can be ejected from the player. The CD
can eject when the ignition or the radio is turned off.
4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to the first
few seconds of each track on each loaded CD. INTRO
displays. To stop scanning press this button again.
The current track begins to play.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The format of the CD might not be compatible. See
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD Player) on page 3-72
page 3-75 later in this section.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
If you have a radio with a single CD (MP3), it is capable
of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc. For more information
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R disc, see “Using an
MP3” in the index.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
CD Messages
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
While a device is connected, turn the portable audio
player on and press the radio CD/AUX button to
hear audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output. Do not plug the headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such as
an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,
or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected to the
auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio
listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button once to
play a CD while a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button a second time for the system to begin
playing audio from the connected portable audio player.
Once in this mode, Auxinput appears on the display. If the
auxiliary jack does not detect the presence of an output
jack, the auxiliary mode does not display.
The auxiliary input jack also accepts cell phone
connectors. Plug the cell phone connector into the
auxiliary input jack to hear a person speaking on a cell
phone during conversation through the vehicle sound
system.
O (Power/Volume): Turn the O knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. Additional adjustments on a
portable device might be needed to get the desired
volume.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The previous volume setting is maintained whenever the
radio is turned on. The volume can be adjusted by
using the volume knob.
Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3/WMA)
Finding a Station
AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station.
The display shows the selection.
FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station.
The display shows the selection.
( ) TUNE: Press the TUNE arrows to select radio
stations.
Press the up TUNE arrow to increase or the down
TUNE arrow to decrease the radio frequencies.
¦ ¥ SEEK: Press the SEEK arrows to seek radio
stations.
Playing the Radio
Press the up SEEK arrow to seek the next radio station
or the down SEEK arrow to seek the previous radio
station.
O (Power/Volume): Press and release this knob
to turn the system on. Press and hold this knob for
more than two seconds to turn the system off.
SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radio stations.
The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press this button again to
stop scanning.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the volume.
When the system is on, press and release this knob to
mute the system. Press and release this knob again
to turn the sound back on.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AST (Automatic Store)
Order of Sound Function
Six FM1 preset stations with the strongest reception
in the region can be automatically stored. Press the
AST button for more than one second. The display
shows AUTO SCANNING and then SCANNING flashes
on the display. Once the stations are stored, the
radio switches to FM1 and the first preset station begins
to play. FM-A displays while listening to the automatic
stored stations. Press the AM or FM button to cancel
automatic store.
The order for displayed sound function is BASS, TRE,
FAD, BAL, EQ OFF, and VOL (Bass, Treble, Fade,
Balance, Equalization Off, and Volume).
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Midrange/Treble): Press this button
until BAS (bass) displays. Turn the O knob to increase
or to decrease the bass. The display shows the bass
level. After making the selection, press this button
to select the bass level.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 36 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six FM-A, six AM1,
six AM2, and six AM-A), can be programmed on the
six numbered buttons, by performing the following steps:
Press this button until MID (midrange) displays. Turn
the O knob to increase or to decrease the midrange.
The display shows the midrange level. After making
the selection, press this button to select the midrange
level.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1, FM2,
FM-A, AM1, AM2, or AM-A.
3. Tune in the desired station.
Press this button until TRE (treble) displays. Turn
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for more than two seconds.
The channel number (CH#1 through CH#6) flashes
on the display when the station has been set.
When that numbered preset button is pressed,
that preset station returns.
the O knob to increase or to decrease the treble.
The display shows the treble level. After making
the selection, press this button to select the treble level.
If a station is weak or has static, decrease the treble.
5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for each preset
button.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Order of Sound Function
The order for displayed sound function is EQ OFF,
CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE,
TECHNO, and EQ OFF.
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this
button until BAL (balance) displays. Turn the O knob to
increase or to decrease the balance. The display shows
the balance level. After making the selection, press this
button to select the balance level.
Playing a CD(s)
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD (fade) displays.
Turn the O knob to increase or to decrease the fade
between the front and the rear speakers. The display
shows the fade level. After making the selection, press
this button to select the fade level.
1. Press and release the load button. A message to
select a slot number from 1 through 6 displays.
2. Press the desired slot number. Wait for the
message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
Setting the EQ (Equalization)
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
(equalization) displays to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop,
voice, and techno. Turn the O knob until the desired
equalization setting displays. After making the selection,
press the SOUND button to select the equalization
setting.
1. Press and hold the load button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and a message to load multiple
discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the LOAD button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
As each CD is inserted, CDP displays. As each CD is
loading, Filecheck displays.
button until EQ OFF displays. Turn the O knob until
OFF displays, then press the SOUND button again to
select the equalization setting.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once playback begins, the track and track number
displays.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. While a CD is in the player
and the ignition is turned on, the radio must be turned on
before the current CD starts playback. When the ignition
and radio are turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeat the current
track. RPT displays. Press this button again to turn
off repeat play.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks
in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM displays.
Press this button again to turn off random play.
4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to the first
few seconds of each track on each loaded CD. INTRO
displays. To stop scanning press this button again.
The current track begins to play.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
5 DSC − (Previous CDC): Press this button to go back
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
to the start of the previous CDC.
6 DSC + (Next CDC): Press this button to go forward
to the start of the next CDC.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
( ) TUNE (Previous/Next Track): Press the up
TUNE arrow to go to the next track. The track number
displays. Press the down TUNE arrow to go to the
start of the current track. The player continues moving
forward or backward through the CD with each press of
the up or down arrows.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player,
it is capable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc.
For more information on how to play an MP3/WMA
disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
CD Messages
AM: Press this button to listen to the radio while a CD
is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
FM: Press this button to listen to the radio while a CD
is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
CD/AUX: Press this button to play a CD while listening
to the radio. CDP displays when the CD player has been
selected. The CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the CD.
PAUSE flashes on the display. Press this button again to
start playing the CD.
• The format of the CD might not be compatible.
See “Using an MP3” later in this section.
EJECT: Press this button to eject the CD. Press and
hold this button to eject all CDs. This is the only way
a CD can be ejected from the player. The CD can eject
when the ignition or the radio is turned off.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
While a device is connected, turn the portable audio
player on and press the radio CD/AUX button to
hear audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
AUX IN (Auxiliary Input): The radio system has an
auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of
the faceplate. This is not an audio output. Do not plug
the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
An external audio device such as an iPod, laptop
computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or XM™ receiver,
etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for
use as another source for audio listening.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Additional adjustments on a portable
device might be needed to get the desired volume.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button once to play
a CD while a portable audio device is playing. Press
this button a second time for the system to begin playing
audio from the connected portable audio player. Once
in this mode, Auxinput displays. If the auxiliary jack does
not detect the presence of an output jack, the auxiliary
mode does not display.
The auxiliary input jack also accepts cell phone
connectors. Plug the cell phone connector into the
auxiliary input jack to hear a person speck on a
cell phone during a conversation through the vehicle
sound system.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Long file names
and folder names can use more disc memory space
than necessary. To conserve space on the disc,
minimize the length of the file and folder names.
An MP3/WMA CD that was recorded using no file
folders can also be played. The system can support
up to eight folders in depth, though, keep the depth of
the folders to a minimum in order to keep down the
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular
folder during playback. If a CD contains more than
the maximum of 50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files,
the player lets you access and navigate up to the
maximum, but all items over the maximum are ignored.
Using an MP3
(Radio with CD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a .m3u or .wma
extension, other file extensions might not work.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory is
displayed as ROOT. All files contained directly under the
root directory are accessed prior to any other directory.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Empty Directory or Folder
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file
structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Folder
File System and Naming
When a CD contains only compressed files, the files are
located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
The song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If the
song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio displays the file name without the extension
(such as MP3/WMA) instead.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
When a CD contains only compressed audio files, but
no folders, all files are located under the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder, the
radio displays ROOT.
Playing an MP3/WMA
While the ignition is on, insert a CD partway into the
slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, Loading, then
Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMA displays. The CD
should begin playing. A CD plays only while the ignition
is on or ACC (Accessory).
Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following order:
• Playback begins from the first track under the root
directory.
As each new track starts to play, the track number,
and the song name displays.
• When all tracks from the root directory have played,
playback continues from files, according to their
numerical listing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When a CD is in the player
and the ignition is turned on, the radio must be turned
on before the CD starts playback. When the ignition
and radio are turned on, the CD starts playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
• After playing the last track from the last folder, the
player begins playing again at the first track of the
first folder or root directory.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Press the SOUND
button for longer than two seconds. The song title or
other available information of a song scrolls on/off.
The offset is scroll on. The scroll mode can be changed
only when the SOUND button is pressed for longer
than two seconds.
DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat the tracks
in the current directory. DIR displays.
Press this button again to repeat the tracks in all of the
directories. ALL displays.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Press this button again to turn off repeat play.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
¦ ¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) (in MP3/WMA
Mode): Press the SEEK arrows to change the folder.
If CD-R does not have any folder, “ROOT” flashes on the
display for a short time.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
( ) TUNE (Previous/Next Track): Press the up
TUNE arrow to go to the next track. The track number
displays. Press the down TUNE arrow to go to the
start of the current track. The player continues moving
forward or backward through the CD with each press of
the TUNE arrows.
INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press this button to
display additional text information related to the current
MP3/WMA song. A choice of additional information such
as: Song Title, Album Title, and Artist. Bit rate might also
display.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
All of the CD functions work the same while playing an
MP3/WMA, except for those listed here. See “Playing
a CD” earlier for more information.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When information is not available, No Info (information)
displays.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
Press this button for longer than two seconds to change
display mode.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
Using an MP3 (Radio with
Six-Disc Player)
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Long file
names and folder names might use more disc memory
space than necessary. To conserve space on the
disc, minimize the length of the file and folder names.
An MP3/WMA CD that was recorded using no file folders
can also be played. The system can support up to
eight folders in depth, though, keep the depth of the
folders to a minimum in order to keep down the difficulty
and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder
during playback. If a CD contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files,
the player lets you access and navigate up to the
maximum, but all items over the maximum is ignored.
MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a .m3u or .wma
extension, other file extensions might not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and
album are available for display by the radio
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory is
displayed as ROOT. All files contained directly under the
root directory are accessed prior to any other directory.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Empty Directory or Folder
File System and Naming
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file
structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
The song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If the
song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio displays the file name without the extension
(such as MP3/WMA) instead.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
No Folder
When a CD contains only compressed files, the files are
located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
Playing an MP3/WMA
While the ignition is on, insert a CD partway into the
slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, Loading, then
Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMA displays. The CD
should begin playing. A CD plays only while the ignition
is on or ACC (Accessory).
When a CD contains only compressed audio files, but
no folders, all files are located under the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder, the
radio displays ROOT.
As each new track starts to play, the track number,
and the song name displays.
Order of Play
Tracks is played in the following order:
• Playback begins from the first track under the root
directory.
• When all tracks from the root directory have played,
playback continues from files, according to their
numerical listing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When a CD is in the player
and the ignition is turned on, the radio must be turned
on before the CD starts playback. When the ignition and
radio are turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
• After playing the last track from the last folder, the
player begins playing again at the first track of the
first folder or root directory.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Press the SOUND
button for longer than two seconds. The song title and
other available information of the song scrolls on/off.
The offset is scroll on. The scroll mode can be changed
only when the SOUND button is pressed for longer than
two seconds.
1 DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat the
tracks in the current directory. DIR displays.
Press this button again to repeat the tracks in all of the
directories. ALL displays.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Press this button again to turn off repeat play.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
¦ ¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) (in MP3/WMA
Mode): Press the SEEK arrows to change the folder.
If CD-R does not have any folder, “ROOT” flashes
on the display for a short time.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
( ) TUNE (Previous/Next Track): Press the up
TUNE arrow to go to the next track. The track number
displays. Press the down TUNE arrow to go to the
start of the current track. The player continues moving
forward or backward through the CD with each press of
the up or down arrows.
INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press this button to
display additional text information related to the current
MP3/WMA song. A choice of additional information such
as: Song Title, Album Title, and Artist. Bit rate might also
display.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
All of the CD functions work the same while playing an
MP3/WMA, except for those listed here. See “Playing
a CD” earlier for more information.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When information is not available, No Info (information)
displays.
When the system is on, press and release this knob to
mute the system. Press and release this knob again
to turn the sound back on.
Press this button for longer than two seconds to change
display mode.
SEEK: Press and release this button within 0.5 seconds
to go to the next preset station.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Press and hold this button for longer than 0.5 seconds to
go to the next radio station. The radio seeks stations only
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
When playing a CD, press and release this button within
0.5 seconds to go to the next track. Press and hold this
button for longer than 0.5 seconds to fast forward through
the tracks.
MODE: Press and release this button to select FM1,
FM2, FM-A, AM1, AM2, AM-A, or CD (MP3). Press and
release this button multiple times to cycle through the
audio playback options that are available on your
vehicle.
Front View of the
Steering Wheel Controls
Side View of the Volume
Control
+ VOLUME −: Press the toggle bar located below
the + VOLUME − to adjust the volume. Press the left
side of the toggle bar, below the + (plus) sign to increase
the volume. Press the right side of the toggle bar,
below the − (minus) sign to decrease the volume.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
PWR (Power): Press and release this knob to turn the
system on. Press and hold this knob for more than
two seconds to turn the system off.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Reception
Care of Your CDs
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug
the item from the accessory power outlet.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the
disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the CD does not play properly or
not at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint
free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the
outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
FM Stereo
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players because
the lens of the CD optics can become contaminated by
lubricants.
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound
to fade in and out.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Fixed Mast Antenna (Hatchback)
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the roof of
the vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger
grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
Backglass Antenna (Sedan)
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna
connector at the top-center of the rear window needs to
be properly attached to the post on the glass.
If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the
antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make
sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are not
damaged. There is enough space between the grid lines
to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering
with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road,
and Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a driver who
will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is
to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a global tragedy.
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision,
and attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death.
These simple defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy
to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control
of your vehicle.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than
if the person had not been drinking.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has ABS,
this warning light will come
on briefly when you start
your vehicle.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
The warning light is on the instrument panel cluster for
a sedan. See Antilock Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-34. For hatchback models, the warning light
is on the Secondary Information Center (SIC). See
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If you do, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, you will still have some power
brake assist. But you will use it when you brake.
Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer
to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. However, if you do not have ABS, your first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it
down — might be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot
respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in
whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the
very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might
feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some
noise, but this is normal.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze
the brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear
or feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
ABS, it is different. See Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-4.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
antilock brakes, adding the hard braking can demand
too much of those places. You can lose control.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road
and make you lose control.
Steering Tips
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
way you want it to go, and slow down.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust
your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on
good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable
conditions you will want to go slower.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
You can avoid these problems by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply the brakes — but, unless you
have antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels.
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up
to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to
slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface
is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as enough water,
ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Antilock Brake System (ABS), remember:
It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
ABS, then in a braking skid, where the wheels are no
longer rolling, release enough pressure on the brakes to
get the wheels rolling again. This restores steering
control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when you
have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are rolling,
you will have steering control.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Driving at Night
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
• Slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles because your headlamps
can only light up so much road ahead.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep-standing or
flowing water.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION:
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They might
not work as well in a quick stop and could
cause pulling to one side. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving
tips include:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warnings and be very cautious about trying
to drive through flowing water.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
Hill and Mountain Roads
Windows clean — inside and outside?
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?
{CAUTION:
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes
on a steep downhill slope.
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
{CAUTION:
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies
in your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of
sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and the
road, you can have a very slippery situation. You have a
lot less traction, or grip, and need to be very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Unless your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), you want to brake very gently, too. If you do have
ABS improves your vehicle’s stability when you make
a hard stop on a slippery road. Whether your vehicle
has ABS or not, begin stopping sooner than you
would on dry pavement. Without ABS, if you feel your
vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little.
Push the brake pedal down steadily to get the most
traction you can.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, unless your vehicle has ABS, if you
brake so hard that the wheels stop rolling, you will
just slide. Brake so the wheels always keep rolling
and you can still steer.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
• Whatever your vehicle’s braking system, allow
greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches can
appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot
reach, such as around clumps of trees, behind
buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch
of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it.
Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice,
and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see
it or smell it, so you might not know it is in
your vehicle. Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.
This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps
the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery
to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1)
or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear,
wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels
in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause
a rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that
does not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If your vehicle does need to
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information
Label - United States
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight or maximum load amount
and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo,
and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will
find the label attached below the door lock
post (striker). The Tire and Loading Information
label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
on page 5-57.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
There is also important loading information on
the Certification label. See “Certification Label”
later in this section.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle’s placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to
tow a trailer.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available
Cargo Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading
information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passenger, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s capacity weight.
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available
Cargo Weight =
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the driver’s side, center
pillar (B-pillar). This label shows the Maximum
Load amount, the number of occupant seating
positions, the original equipment tires, and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
For more information on tires and inflation
Tire and Loading Information
Label - Canada
There is also important loading information on
the Certification label. See “Certification Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the “Maximum Load” amount.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from the Maximum Load
amount.
Label Example
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the Maximum Load amount
equals 1400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be
five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Example 1
Description
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
A
Weight or Maximum
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Load, for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Your vehicle is not designed nor intended
to tow a trailer.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Vehicle Capacity
A
Weight or Maximum
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Weight or Maximum
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Load for Example 2 =
Load for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available
Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available
Cargo Weight =
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum load weight.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification Label
Label Example - Canada
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s door
latch. This label tells you the gross weight capacity
of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never
exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front
or rear axle.
Label Example - United States
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out. See “Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this section.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can shorten the
life of your vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-12.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle, such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common types of recreational
vehicle towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing
your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground)
and “dolly towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels
on the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must
be towed, you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing”
that follows for more information.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Set the parking brake and remove the key.
Dolly Towing
4. For an automatic transmission, insert the key
into the shift-lock release slot. See Shifting
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear with the
front wheels on the ground could cause transmission
damage. Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with
the front wheels on the road.
5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
6. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
7. Release the parking brake.
Towing a Trailer
Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The vehicle
is not designed or intended for such a use. Towing
a trailer can adversely affect handling, durability
and fuel economy.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P)
or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine
GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-17.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind
noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer/retailer has
additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by
your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Additives
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help
keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if
your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
To open the fuel filler door,
pull up on the release
lever with this symbol on it.
It is located on the floor
on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly
burned. This spray can happen if your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any
hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all
the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
Hatchback shown. Sedan similar
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-49.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
Checking Things Under
the Hood
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle inside the
{CAUTION:
vehicle. It is located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Securely place the hood prop into the slot on the
inner fender.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the
secondary hood release lever, located under the
front center of the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
inner fender and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the
hood 12 inches (30 cm) above the vehicle and release
it so it fully latches. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the process if necessary.
3. Lift the hood and release the hood prop from its
retainer located on the underside of the hood.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
If the engine oil pressure
light comes on, check the
engine oil level right away.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
D. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
page 5-21.
The oil pressure light is on the instrument panel cluster
For hatchbacks, the oil pressure light is on the
Secondary Information Center (SIC). See Oil Pressure
oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.
page 5-26.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-31.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark on the
dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
• You frequently use a carrier on top of your vehicle.
• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi, or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, you need to change the oil and filter every
3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, whichever
occurs first.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance and
engine protection.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months, whichever occurs
first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions will cause engine oil to break
down slower.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
{CAUTION:
Inspect the engine air cleaner/filter every
15,000 miles (25 000 km) and replace it every
30,000 miles (50 000 km). If you are driving in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you are driving.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Remove the screws and lift off the cover.
2. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Put the cover back on tightly and tighten the screws.
page 6-4 for replacement intervals.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Check your automatic transmission fluid level at least
twice a year. Add fluid if needed. See At Least Twice
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 158°F to 176°F
(70°C to 80°C).
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, fluid should be
between MIN and MAX mark of the hot area of
the dipstick.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
push the dipstick back in all the way.
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The automatic transmission dipstick is located toward
the front of the engine compartment, near the power
steering fluid reservoir. See Engine Compartment
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transmission fluid to use. See
on page 6-23.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag
or paper towel.
2. Push the dipstick back in all the way, wait three
seconds and then pull it back out again.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the area between the
two dimples in the hot range on the dipstick.
Manual Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealer/retailer
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Hydraulic Clutch
There is one reservoir for both the brake and the
more information.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by your warranty. Always use the
automatic transmission fluid listed in Part D:
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir is filled
with hydraulic fluid.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
When to Check and What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often you should check the fluid level in your
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid.
on page 6-23.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-25.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
To check the fluid level, look on the side of the reservoir.
If the fluid reaches the MAX (A) mark on the reservoir,
the fluid level is correct. If the fluid does not reach
the MIN (B) mark on the reservoir, then fluid needs
to be added. The reservoir is located near the back
of the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the
page 5-12 for more information on location.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Part D: Recommended
information.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap — even
a little — when the engine and radiator are hot.
To check the engine coolant, the vehicle must be on a
level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant
level should be between the Maximum (A) and
Minimum (B) marks on the coolant surge tank. The level
rises at engine operation temperature and drops
again when the engine cools down.
The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rear of
the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the
page 5-12 for more information on location.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank, but only
when the engine is cool. If the coolant surge tank is
empty, a special fill procedure is necessary. See Engine
Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
You may decide not to lift the hood, but to get service
help right away.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. To check the
engine coolant, the vehicle should be parked on a
level surface. Make sure that the air conditioning
is turned off.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, your vehicle needs service.
The coolant level should be between the Minimum and
Maximum marks on the coolant surge tank when the
engine is cool. If it is not, you may have a leak at
the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the
cooling system.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
CAUTION: (Continued)
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant
surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not between the Minimum and
Maximum marks, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and a proper coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise about two or
two and one-half turns.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the Maximum mark, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer/retailer, if necessary.
Power Steering Fluid
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the Maximum mark on the coolant surge tank.
Wait about five minutes, then check to see if
the level is below the mark. If the level is below the
Maximum mark, add additional coolant to bring
the level up to the mark. Repeat this procedure until
the level remains constant at the Maximum mark
for at least five minutes.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the
front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side
page 5-12 for reservoir location.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
page 6-23. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to
use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage
hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
The level should be between the MIN (B) and MAX (A)
marks on the reservoir. If the level drops below the
MIN (B) mark, add power steering fluid. Do not overfill
the reservoir and remember to replace the cap
tightly when you are finished and clean up any
spilled fluid.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Washer Fluid
Brakes
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Brake Fluid
Your vehicle has one
reservoir for both the brake
and clutch hydraulic
systems. It is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
reservoir.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake or clutch hydraulic
system. If it is, you should have the brake/clutch
hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or
clutch hydraulic system, the brakes or clutch
might not work well. This could cause a crash.
Always use the proper brake fluid.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the
brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
or clutch hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake or clutch hydraulic
system can damage brake or clutch hydraulic
system parts so badly that they will have
to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
What to Add
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
on page 6-23.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
can come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
If you have rear drum brakes, they do not have wear
indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or
changing. When you have the front brake pads
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, the disc
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or
heavier stop, then the brakes might not adjust correctly.
If you drive in that way, then — very carefully — make a
few moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles
(1 600 km), so the brakes will adjust properly.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it
is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
If the brake pedal goes down farther than normal,
the rear drum brakes might need adjustment. Adjust
them by backing up and firmly applying the brakes
a few times.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-36 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Jump Starting
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
for more information on location.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Flip the cap up to access the positive (+) terminal.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from
the dead battery, but
not near engine
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
parts that move.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
The electrical connection is just as good there, and
the chance of sparks getting back to the battery
is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cap to its original
position.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (Hatchback)
To replace a headlamp bulb:
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
for more information.
2. Remove the five screws from top of the radiator
grille.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
3. Remove the radiator grille.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
4. Remove the three bolts from the headlamp assembly.
5. Remove the headlamp assembly.
6. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from
the rear of the bulb.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Install the new bulb.
11. Install the bulb retaining spring.
12. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 to install the headlamp
assembly.
Headlamps (Sedan)
To replace a headlamp bulb:
for more information.
7. Remove the headlamp cap.
8. Release the spring that retains the bulb by loosing
the screw.
9. Remove the old bulb.
2. Remove the three bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the headlamp assembly.
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps (Hatchback)
4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
rear of the bulb.
To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb:
5. Remove the headlamp cap.
1. Remove the radiator grille and the headlamp
assembly. See Steps 2 through 5 under Headlamps
on page 5-42 for instructions on how to remove the
headlamp assembly.
6. Release the spring that retains the bulb.
7. Remove the old bulb.
8. Install the new bulb.
9. Install the bulb retaining spring.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to install the headlamp
assembly.
2. Turn the front turn signal bulb socket
counterclockwise.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of the lamp
housing.
4. Press the bulb inward and turn it counterclockwise
to remove it from the bulb socket.
5. Install the new bulb into the socket by pressing it in
and turning it clockwise.
6. Install the socket into the lamp housing by turning it
clockwise.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to install the assembly.
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps (Sedan)
To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb:
3. Turn the front turn signal bulb socket
counterclockwise.
for more information.
4. Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of the lamp
housing.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly. See Steps 2
instructions on how to remove the headlamp
assembly.
5. Press the bulb inward and turn it counterclockwise
to remove it from the bulb socket.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Install the new bulb into the socket by pressing it in
and turning it clockwise.
7. Install the socket into the lamp housing by turning it
clockwise.
on page 5-42 to install the assembly.
Turn Signal Lamps (Side)
To replace a side turn signal bulb:
for more information.
on page 5-42 to access the side turn signal lamps.
5. Remove the bulb from the lamp housing by pulling
the bulb straight out of the socket.
3. Remove the side turn signal lamp assembly
by pulling it forward.
6. Install the new bulb into the bulb socket by pushing
it in and rotating the bulb socket clockwise.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise.
7. Push the side turn signal lamp assembly back into
its original position.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) (Sedan)
To replace a CHMSL bulb on the hatchback, contact
your dealer/retailer.
To replace a CHMSL bulb on the sedan:
information.
2. Remove the two screws and the lamp housing.
Disconnect the wiring harness connector before
removing the lamp housing.
3. Remove the five screws and the reflector assembly.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of the
bulb holder.
5. Install the new bulb.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To replace a taillamp, turn signal lamp, stoplamp, or
back-up bulb:
information.
Sedan
2. Remove the two screws and the lamp assembly.
3. Remove the bulb socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing the
bulb and turning it counterclockwise.
5. Install the appropriate bulb into the socket.
Hatchback
6. Replace the bulb socket into the lamp housing.
Turn the bulb socket clockwise to secure.
7. Reverse Step 2 to reinstall the lamp housing.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
License Plate Lamp
Replacement Bulbs
To replace one of these bulbs:
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-Up
94535571
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
94535587
94535548
94535574
Headlamps
Front Parking/Turn Signal
(Hatchback)
Front Parking/Turn Signal
(Sedan)
94535574
Side Turn Signal (Hatchback)
Side Turn Signal (Sedan)
Stoplamp/Taillamps
94535587
94535587
94535574
94535572
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps.
Turn Signal Lamps
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp toward you
through the opening.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is how to remove and replace the windshield
wiper blade:
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See “Wiper Blade Check” for more
information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type,
on page 5-100.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the wiper blade
off the arm.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you
ever have questions about your tire warranty
and where to obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or
if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger car tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto
both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
Passenger Car Tire Example
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction
and temperature resistance. For more information
(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger car tire size.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 5-57.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 70% as high
as it is wide.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply
construction.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and the speed rating of
a tire. The load range represents the load
carry capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-57.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
page 4-18.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-18.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which
a tire can operate.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more
weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even when
they are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping
out dirt and moisture.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210
of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
for additional information.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. If your vehicle has this feature, the TPMS
sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
tire information label and its location on your vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light on the instrument
panel cluster.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
The low tire pressure warning light comes on at each
ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
TPMS Malfunction Light
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When
the system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning
light flashes for about one minute and then stays
on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. The low tire
warning light comes on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light to come on are:
TPMS Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors,
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel positions,
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The TPMS malfunction light should go
off when the TPMS sensors are installed and
the sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs
of wear or damage. See When It Is Time for
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Part A: Scheduled
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
more information.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
tire and loading information label. See Loading
the tire and loading information label and where
it is located on your vehicle. Make certain that
all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-99.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
One way to tell when
it is time for new tires
is to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your
tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
or less of tread remaining.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
{CAUTION:
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires that are the same size,
brand, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires. This way, your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give the same performance
and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original
additional information.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
It is all right to drive with your compact spare
temporarily, as it was developed for use on your
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This
is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
tires not recommended for your vehicle are installed.
Tires that do not match the original equipment tires
could give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
lower than the proper warning level you would get with
original equipment tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading
about the Tire and Loading Information label and its
location on your vehicle.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (11⁄2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum selection width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the Unites States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
Traction — AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does
not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature — A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular basis. However,
if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to be
checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have
to replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
Use the jack provided with your vehicle only
for changing a flat tire.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
When you have a flat tire, use the following example
as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel
blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The compact spare tire and tools you will need are
located in the trunk.
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Jack Handle
D. Screwdriver
information.
2. Lift the trim cover.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the foam tray.
5. Turn the retainer counterclockwise and remove it
from the compact spare.
4. Remove the jack, the jack handle and the wheel
wrench from the foam tray.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
2. If your vehicle has wheel covers, loosen the four
plastic caps by hand or by using the wheel
wrench. The plastic nuts do not come off of the
cover.
3. Remove the wheel cover using the flat end of the
jack handle. Pry along the edge of the wheel cover
until it comes off.
Store the wheel cover in the cargo area until you
have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hatchback
Sedan
5. Locate the notch in the frame near each wheel
which the jack head fits in.
6. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire.
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack and the wheel
wrench onto the end of the jack handle.
10. Remove all of the wheel nuts by turning them
counterclockwise.
11. Remove the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
{CAUTION:
and spare wheel.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 5-70.
13. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
14. Install the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand
clockwise until the wheel is held against the hub.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
16. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new original
equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as
soon as you can and have the nuts tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-99 for wheel nut torque specification.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
page 5-99 for the wheel nut torque specification.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
{CAUTION:
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 50 mph
(80 km/h), so you can finish your trip and have your
full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want.
Of course, it is best to replace your spare with a full-size
tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer
and be in good shape in case you need it again.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
To store a flat or compact spare tire and tools:
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire
and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
1. Store the flat tire or the compact spare in the
compact spare tire compartment.
2. Secure the retainer.
3. Store the tools securely in the foam tray and
place the tray back in the cargo area.
4. Replace the trim cover.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire
as soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-78.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep your
spare tire and its wheel together.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For soils, always try to remove them first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove
as much of the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To clean, use the following instructions:
Leather
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water
or club soda.
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring
formation may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of
your interior and are not recommended. Do not use
silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that
can damage the emblems or nameplates on
your vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it
states that is should not be used on plastic parts,
do not use it on your vehicle or damage may occur
and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-83.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
manufacturers’ directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care product.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating
of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for
all bright metal parts.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid
or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap,
and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may
cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if
they are worn or damaged.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Tires
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could be damaged.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil
and asphalt.
Cleans, shines and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN
also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps
to turn off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring
checked right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is
fixed or goes away.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the end of
the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle.
Sedan
To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door by
pulling the door out.
To reinstall the door, first insert the rear edge of the
fuse panel door, then push the front of the door into
the end of the instrument panel to secure it.
Hatchback
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
AUX LTR
Auxiliary Cigarette Lighter
HORN,
REAR/FOG
Horn, Rear Fog Lamps
LTR
Cigarette Lighter
Stop Lamp
STOP
RADIO, CLK Audio, Clock
CLSTR,
HAZRD
Instrument Panel Cluster,
Hazard Flasher
TRN/SIG
DR/LCK
Turn Signal
Door Lock, Remote Keyless Entry
CLSTR, CLK Instrument Panel Cluster, Clock
Engine Control Module (ECM),
ECM, TCM
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
BCK/UP
WPR, WSWA Wiper, Washer
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Back-Up Lamp
ECM, TCM
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Hatchback
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
ENG FUSE
Engine Fuse
ALTERNATOR Alternator
HVAC
AIRBAG 1
BLANK
ABS
HVAC Blower
Airbag 1
Not Used
Antilock Brake System
DIODE (ABS) Antilock Brake System Diode
AIRBAG 2
BLANK
Airbag 2
Not Used
CLK, RADIO Clock, Audio
Fuses
Usage
SDM
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Windshield Wiper Switch,
Windshield Wiper Motor
WIPER
Instrument Panel Cluster,
Brake Switch, Anti-theft Mode
CLUSTER
T/SIG
EMS2
Turn Signal, Hazard Switch
Stoplamp Switch
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
B/UP LAMP
HORN
Usage
Back-up Lamps
Engine Room Fuse Block,
Rear HO2S, Transmission
Control Module, VSS, Fuel Pump
EMS1
Horn
Mirror Control Switch, Dome Lamp,
Air Conditioning Switch
STOP LAMP Brake Switch
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary
ELEC MIRROR
AUDIO/RKE
CIGAR
Radio, Remote Keyless Entry,
Clock, Power Mirror Unit,
Anti-Theft Module
Power Outlet
AUDIO/CLOCK Radio, Clock
OBD
On-Board Diagnostics, Immobilizer
DEFOG
Power Mirror Unit, Air Conditioning
Switch
MIRROR
Trunk Lamp, Trunk Open Switch,
Cluster, Dome Lamp
ROOM LAMP
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
DEFOGGER Rear Defogger
SUNROOF
DRL
Sunroof Module (Option)
Daytime Running Lamps
DOOR LOCK Door Lock/Unlock
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on
the driver side of the vehicle, near the battery.
more information on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Sedan
To access the fuses, pull out the top and bottom
flaps to release the cover. To reinstall the cover,
push the cover until it is secure.
Hatchback
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
HI BEAM RT
DIS
Usage
Passenger Side High Beam
Headlamp
Direct Ignition System
HI BEAM LT Driver Side High Beam Headlamp
DIODE (FOG) Fog Lamp Diode
Passenger Side Low Beam
LOW BEAM RT
Headlamp
Parking Lamp Right Side,
ILLUM RT
Illumination Circuit
LOW BEAM LT Driver Side Low Beam Headlamp
Driver Side Parking Lamp,
ILLUM LT
License Plate Lamp
INT LTS
INJECTOR
DEFOG
Room Lamp
Injector
Defogger
Sunroof
S/ROOF
ILLUM LAMPS Illumination Relay
HORN Horn
HEAD LAMPS Headlamps
Hatchback
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
FUEL
A/C
Usage
Relays
Usage
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioning Compressor
BLANK
Not Used
COOL FAN
LOW
Cooling Fan Low
FOG LAMPS Front Fog Lamp
HEAD
LAMPS HI
High Beam Headlamp
Low Beam Headlamp
HVAC
BLOWER
Heating, Ventilation,
Air Conditioning Blower
HEAD
LAMPS LOW
ABS
Antilock Brake System
I/P FUSE
BATT.
PWR WNDW Power Window
FRT FOG Fog Lamp
Instrument Panel Fuse Box
COOL FAN
IGN 2
Radiator Fan
Ignition 2
Blank
MAIN POWER Main Power
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
BLANK
IGN 1
A/C COMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor
COOL FAN HI Cooling Fan High
ILLUM LAMPS Illumination Lamps
Ignition 1
PWR WNDW Power Windows
SPARE Spare
BLANK
Not Used
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
BATT
Usage
Fuses
IGN2/ST
ACC/IGN1
Usage
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Driver Side Parking Lamp, Taillamp
Ignition Switch
Ignition Switch
Hazard Lamps,
PK/LP LH
Passenger Side Parking
Lamp, Taillamp
PK/LP RH
HAZARD
Theft-Deterrent System
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
H/L LOW RH
FAN HI
Usage
Relays
Usage
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
H/L LOW
RELAY
Low-Beam Headlamp Relay
Cooling Fan High Speed
FAN HI RELAY Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
H/L LOW LH Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump Relay
RELAY
FRT FOG
FAN LOW
H/L HI
Front Fog Lamps (Option)
Cooling Fan Low Speed
High-Beam Headlamps
P/WINDOW
Power Window Relay
RELAY
PARK LAMP
Parking Lamp Relay
RELAY
Air Conditioning Compressor
(Option)
A/C COMP
FRT FOG
Front Fog Lamps Relay
RELAY
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
SPARE
ABS
Spare
H/L HI RELAY High-Beam Headlamp Relay
Antilock Brake System (Option)
FAN LOW
Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
RELAY
LEGR Valve, HO2S, EVAP Canister
Purge Solenoid, CMP Sensor
EMS2
A/C RELAY
Air Conditioning Relay (Option)
P/WINDOW1 Power Window Switch (Option)
MAIN RELAY Main Relay
Engine Control Module,
ECU
Transmission Control Module
Misc.
Usage
SPARE
EMS1
Spare
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
Engine Control Module, Injector,
Cooling Fan, Air Conditioning
Compressor
SPARE
Spare
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Part D: Recommended Fluids
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant
charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label
located under the hood. See your dealer/retailer
for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
6.3 qt
3.96 qt
11.9 gal
6.2 qt
6.0 L
3.75 L
45.0 L
5.87 L
1.8 L
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Transmission, Automatic
Transmission, Manual
Wheel Nut Torque
1.9 qt
81 lb ft
110 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Automatic and
Manual
1.6L L4 (L91)
6
0.039-0.043 inch (1.0-1.1 mm)
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
ACDelco® Part
Part
Passenger Compartment Filter
GM Part Number
Number
96539649
96536694
—
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Fuel Filter
—
—
96458873/96395221
96537170
—
Spark Plugs
96130723
IFR6E111
Windshield Wiper Blade- Hatchback
Driver’s Side
96497155
96619022
96301840
—
—
—
Passenger’s Side
Rear
Windshield Wiper Blade- Sedan
Driver’s Side
96648556
96648561
—
—
Passenger’s Side
1NGK
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in
this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer/retailer can
perform for you.
Your dealer/retailer has trained and supported service
people that will perform the work using genuine parts.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work. See
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine parts.
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
But we do not know exactly how you will drive it.
You might drive short distances only a few times a week.
Or you might drive long distances all the time in very
hot, dusty weather. You might use your vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on the Tire and Loading
page 4-18.
Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Short Trip/City Intervals
Selecting the Right Schedule
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
First you will need to decide which of the two schedules
is right for your vehicle. Here is how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Short Trip/City Definition
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Spark Plug Replacement. EVAP
System Service. PCV System Service.
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
Every 37,500 Miles (60 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Fluid Change (severe service only).
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
Every 42,000 Miles (70 000 km): Engine Oil Pan Drain
Plug Washer Replacement.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi, or other commercial application.
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement. EVAP System
Solenoid Valve Replacement.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement. EVAP System
Solenoid Valve Replacement.
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of
the conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads.
Use the Short Trip/City schedule for these conditions.
Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Engine Oil Pan Drain Plug Washer
Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions will cause engine oil to break
down slower.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and
Filter Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs
first). Tire Rotation.
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.
The services shown in this schedule up to
100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeated after
100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the same intervals
for the life of this vehicle. The services shown at
150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be repeated at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km)
for the life of this vehicle.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Spark Plug Replacement. EVAP
System Service. PCV System Service.
Every 37,500 Miles (60 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Fluid Change (severe service only).
page 6-22.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Footnotes
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that
the failure to perform this maintenance item will
not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.
We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance
services be performed at the indicated intervals and
the maintenance be recorded.
on page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,
replace the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect filter at every engine oil change.
more information.
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
on page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
on page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
✍ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP
vent solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
on page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +)
✍ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
on page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
37,500 Miles (60 000 km)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
✍ Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
✍ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,
replace the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect filter at every engine oil change.
more information.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
on page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ Replace timing belt.
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines. Replace
EVAP vent solenoid valve. An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote †.)
on page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
on page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
on page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
✍ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
on page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,
replace the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect filter at every engine oil change.
more information.
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
✍ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
on page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
✍ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
✍ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
✍ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP
vent solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
✍ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
page 5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
✍ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to
100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeated after
100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the same intervals
for the life of this vehicle. The services shown at
150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be repeated at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km)
for the life of this vehicle.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
page 6-22.
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that
the failure to perform this maintenance item will
not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.
We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance
services be performed at the indicated intervals and
the maintenance be recorded.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP
vent solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
✍ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
✍ Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
✍ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
✍ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
✍ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission Control
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
Service.
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
✍ Replace timing belt.
✍ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines. Replace
EVAP vent solenoid valve. An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote †.)
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
✍ Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
✍ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
✍ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
✍ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
page 5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
page 5-61 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
✍ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
✍ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
✍ Inspect drive belt(s).
✍ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and EVAP
vent solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
✍ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified
to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as
shown in Part D.
Inspect the tires and make sure the tires are inflated to
the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the spare
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt
assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed
safety belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-22.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiper Blade Check
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
Check the fluid level in the brake/clutch reservoir.
this system could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired at once.
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
page 5-84 for more information.
At Least Once a Year
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood and body
door hinges, rear compartment, and any folding
seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
Manual Transmission Check
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the
system and repair if needed.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starter Switch Check
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
on page 2-26 if necessary.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately
if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal down halfway
and try to start the engine. The starter should
work only when the clutch pedal is pushed down
all the way to the floor. If the starter works when the
clutch pedal is not pushed all the way down, your
vehicle needs service.
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
CAUTION: (Continued)
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
• With an automatic transmission, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
• With a manual transmission, the ignition should
turn to LOCK/OFF only when you press the key
release button.
On all vehicles, the ignition key should come out only
in LOCK/OFF.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism
Check
{CAUTION:
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year, for instance,
each spring and fall. You should let your dealer/retailer
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs
are completed at once.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
Proper procedures to perform these services can be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Steering, Suspension and Front
Brake System Inspection
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system
for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack
of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for
damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings for
wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or
conditions result in frequent braking.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing, or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections, or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,
in Canada 89021807).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Manual
Transmission
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Chassis Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
To determine the proper viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-22
Manual
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Transmission
Shift Linkage
Engine Oil
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Engine Coolant
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor, and
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
System
or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Release Pawl
Windshield
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood and Door
Hinges
Washer Solvent
Power Steering DEXRON®-VI Automatic
System
Transmission Fluid.
Weatherstrip Lubricant
Use only T-IV Automatic
Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,
in Canada 22689186).
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Automatic
Transmission
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact
General Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior
to filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given
in your case, you may reject it and proceed with
any other venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle
age, mileage, and other factors. General Motors
reserves the right to change eligibility limitations
and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1
and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited wants
you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program provides for the review of
the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter,
and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed in about
70 days. We believe our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because
it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call
the General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French),
or you may write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe
to E-News and use tools and forms with
greater ease.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
www.Chevrolet.com
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the
U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can
dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance Offices
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
United States — Customer Assistance
www.gmcanada.com
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Services Provided
Roadside Assistance Program
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100.
For vehicles purchased in the U.S.,
call 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872);
(Text telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
For vehicles purchased in Canada,
call 1-800-268-6800.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle
to get to the nearest service station (approximately
$5 in Canada). In Canada, service to provide diesel
may be restricted. For safety reasons, propane and
other alternative fuels will not be provided through
this service.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle,
you are automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet
Roadside Assistance program.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available
if you have an active OnStar® subscription.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,
a person driving this vehicle without the consent
of the owner is not eligible for coverage.
To ensure security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided.
In Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle
is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
of $50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of
$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of
the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting
for your vehicle to be repaired.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and a
copy of the repair order are required.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in
North America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests will be limited
to six per calendar year.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty
related vehicle disablement, while en route and
over 250 kilometres from the original point of
departure, you may qualify for trip interruption
expense assistance. This assistance covers
reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum
of $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or
driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims become
excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
of the vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Shuttle Service
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and
distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty
coverage information.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental
vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary
and may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician
using the proper equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used
for repair. These parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts.
Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that
no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger
or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-8 for more information.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
headquarters the next day and you can get a
copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some
states/provinces with “no fault” insurance laws,
a report may not be necessary. This is especially
true if there are no injuries and both vehicles
are driveable.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for a
police report, phone or go to the police department
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have
the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
Service Manuals
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Owner Information
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, specify year and model
name of the vehicle.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor
and control engine and transmission performance,
to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash and, if so equipped,
to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate
the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
If your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribe to
the OnStar® services, please refer to the OnStar®
Terms and Conditions for information on data collection
and use.
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for
deletion instructions.
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System (cont.)
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P
Paint, Damage ............................................... 5-86
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Safety Belts (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service, Scheduling Appointments ..................... 7-10
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-73
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-26
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
